2k15i gmc yukon den 23168273B.ai (Modern Bridge - … 2015i Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual (GMNA- Black plate (4,1) Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico ... Headlamp High/Low-Beam

2k15i_gmc_yukon_den_23168273B.ai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust

(Image set @ 60% Transparency

Color = Black

Date = 08/05/14

Black plate (1,1)GMC 2015i Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-8431504) - 2015 - CRC - 7/30/14

2015 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-50Universal Remote System . . . . 5-58

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-41Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-54Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-84

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41


2015 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, YUKON, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23168273 B Second Printing ©2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

{ Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . 1-18

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Active Emergency BrakingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Universal Remote System . . . 1-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-6.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5-33.

3. g Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-41.

j Power Assist Steps onpage 2-18 (If Equipped).

X Parking Assist Button (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backingon page 9-55.

@ Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9-65 (IfEquipped).

0 Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9-19.

4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

5. Favorite Switches (Out of View).See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Volume Switches (Out of View).See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

6. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-4.

7. Instrument Cluster on page 5-11.

8. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-29.

Tow/Haul Selector Button. SeeTow/Haul Mode on page 9-34.

Range Selection Mode (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode onpage 9-32.

9. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

10. Infotainment on page 7-1.

11. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-6.

12. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Fog Lamps on page 6-5 (IfEquipped).

13. Parking Brake on page 9-39.

14. Automatic Transfer Case Knob(If Equipped). See Four-WheelDrive on page 9-35.

15. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-20.

16. Trailer Brake Control Panel (IfEquipped). See TowingEquipment on page 9-77.

17. Cruise Control on page 9-44.

Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 9-47 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-58 (IfEquipped).

18. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

19. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.


1-4 In Brief

20. Horn on page 5-3.

21. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

22. Ignition Positions onpage 9-20.

23. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Cooled Front SeatButtons. See Heated andCooled Front Seats onpage 3-7.

24. Rear Climate Control Buttons.See Rear Climate ControlSystem on page 8-5.

25. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsand it may work up to 60 m (197 ft)away from the vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

b : Press twice to open or closethe liftgate. Press once to stop theliftgate from moving.

c : Press twice to open theliftglass.


In Brief 1-5

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System onpage 2-2.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on. The doors will belocked and the climate controlsystem may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps if a 10-minuteextension is desired. Remote startcan be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-9.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Pushing down the manual lockknob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down the lockknob on a passenger door willlock that door only.

. Pulling the door handle once willunlock that door. Pulling thehandle again will unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.


1-6 In Brief

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2-11.

Keyless Access

If equipped with Keyless Access,the RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the driver door.Pressing the button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the handle button is pressedagain within five seconds, thepassenger doors and liftgate willunlock. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle andlift up. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.


In Brief 1-7

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console. On the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Pressing and releasingb while theliftgate is moving stops the liftgate.Pressing again reverses thedirection.

To close, pressl on the bottomof the liftgate next to the latch.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, select OFF on the liftgateswitch. See Liftgate on page 2-13.

Windows

The power windows work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-25.

If equipped, the front and rearwindows have an express-downfeature. The front windows have anexpress-up feature. See Windowson page 2-25 and Power Windowson page 2-25.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.


1-8 In Brief

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Memory Features

The SET, "1," "2," andB (Exit)buttons on the driver door are usedto manually save and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, and adjustablepedals.

See Memory Seats on page 3-5 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.


In Brief 1-9

Second Row SeatsThe second row seatbacks can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The seatbacks alsorecline.

See Second Row Seats onpage 3-9.

Third Row SeatsThird row seatbacks can be folded.See Third Row Seats on page 3-14.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are on the center stackbelow the climate control system. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

PressA to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seatson page 3-7.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.


1-10 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-16.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-18.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-19.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-47.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-33.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-19.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.


In Brief 1-11

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

To power fold the mirrors:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-22.

Heated Mirrors

Press1 to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The mirror automatically reducesthe glare of headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2-24.

Steering WheelAdjustmentPower Tilt and Telescope SteeringWheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescope steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


1-12 In Brief

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is to the left of the steeringwheel.

Press the switch to the left to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the switch to the right to movethe pedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9-19.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats on page 3-5.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF: Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON: Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).


In Brief 1-13

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps withthe parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Fog Lamps on page 6-5


1-14 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT: Turn thez FRONT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

L m : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

Rainsense™

With Rainsense, a sensor near thetop center of the windshield detectsthe amount of water on thewindshield and controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

3 INT: Turn thez FRONTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO: Press to turnRainsense on or off. When turnedon andz FRONT is in one of theRainsense wipe sensitivitypositions, the wipers can beadjusted for more or less sensitivityto moisture. When turned off, thewipers operate as timed intermittentwipers and can be adjusted formore or less frequent wipes. A DICmessage may be displayed whenRainsense is turned on or off.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.


In Brief 1-15

Climate ControlsThis system controls the heating,cooling, and ventilation.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger Temperature Control

7. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

8. Air Recirculation

9. Rear Climate Control PowerButton

10. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

11. Front Climate Control PowerButton

12. Rear Fan Control

13. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control

14. Rear Temperature Control

15. RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout)

16. Rear Window Defogger

17. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1 and RearClimate Control System on page 8-5(if equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the shift lever tothe M (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the M. This is the highestattainable range with all lowergears accessible. As anexample, when 5 (Fifth) gear isselected, 1 (First) through5 (Fifth) gears are available.


1-16 In Brief

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode on page 9-32.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-34.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has four-wheel drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction.

Automatic Transfer Case

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

The transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering wheel. Use this knobto shift into and out of the differentfour-wheel drive modes.

2 m : This setting is used for drivingin most street and highwaysituations.

AUTO: This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

4 m : Use the Four-Wheel DriveHigh position when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

4 n : Vehicles with a two speedautomatic transfer case have aFour-Wheel Drive Low position. Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might choose 4 n ifyou are driving off-road in deepsand, mud, or snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

N (Neutral): Shift the transfer caseto N (Neutral) only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-77 or Towing theVehicle on page 10-77.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-35.


In Brief 1-17

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light is white whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

SET −: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

+RES: If there is a set speed inmemory, press to resume thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-44 orAdaptive Cruise Control onpage 9-47 (If Equipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.


1-18 In Brief

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-30.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-58.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidunintentional lane departures atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW light, @, is green if a lanemarking is detected. If the vehicledeparts the lane, the light will

change to amber and flash. Inaddition, the driver seat will pulse orbeeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-65.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with vehicles inthe side blind zone (or spot) areasor with vehicles rapidly approachingthese areas from behind. The LCAwarning display will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system is included as part of theLCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9-62 and Lane ChangeAlert (LCA) on page 9-62.


In Brief 1-19

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle on thecenter stack display when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toaid with parking and low-speedbacking maneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9-55.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system usesa triangle with an arrow displayedon the RVC screen to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may crossyour vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA maydisplay a warning triangle on theRear Vision Camera screen and agraphic on the instrument cluster toprovide the object distance. Inaddition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system.


Active EmergencyBraking SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the ActiveEmergency Braking System, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA) and the Automatic

Collision Preparation (ACP) System.These systems can provide a boostto braking or automatically brake thevehicle to help avoid or lessen theseverity of crashes when driving in aforward gear.

See Active Emergency BrakingSystem on page 9-60.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fiveaccessory power outlets:

Vehicles with a Center Console. One in front of the cupholders on

the center console.. One inside the center storage

console.. One on the rear of the center

storage console.. One in the third row seat on the

driver side.


1-20 In Brief

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side.

Vehicles with Bench Seats. One on the center stack below

the climate control system.. One in the storage area on the

bench seat.. One on the rear of the center

armrest storage.. One in the third row seat area on

the driver side.. One in the rear cargo area on

the passenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-7.

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the UniversalRemote system, these buttons willbe in the front overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-58.

Sunroof

1. Open or Close

2. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-25.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of switch (2) to ventthe sunroof.


In Brief 1-21

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (1) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (1) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (1) until the sunroof reachesthe desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front ofswitch (1). Press the switch again tostop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof on page 2-28.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started andbegins to move.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. The traction off light idisplays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-44.


1-22 In Brief

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press andhold g until i and g illuminatein the instrument cluster and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-44.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

. StabiliTrak will automatically turnon if the vehicle exceeds56 km/h (35 mph). Tractioncontrol will remain off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-41.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-50.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

2. Press and hold V for severalseconds. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.


In Brief 1-23

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. See OnStar Overviewon page 14-1.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-19Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-21

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-23Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-24Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

There is a key in the transmitter.

This key is used for the driver doorand glove box.

The transmitter has a button on theside used to remove the key. Do notpull the key out without pressing thebutton.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

With Remote Start (withoutRemote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped, press and release Q,then immediately press and hold/until the turn signal flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-9.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicate

locking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-19.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. If enabled



through the DIC, the exterior lampsmay turn on. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

If equipped, memory seat positionsmay be recalled when unlocking thevehicle if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50 andMemory Seats on page 3-5.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System onpage 2-19.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

b (Liftgate): Press twice to openor close the liftgate. Press once tostop the liftgate from moving.

c (Liftglass): Press twice to openthe liftglass.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release toinitiate vehicle locate. The turnsignal lamps flash and the hornsounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN or 7 is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor doors and the liftgate to beaccessed without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the door being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bea button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and liftgate willunlock.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. It has been more than

five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. The lock/unlock button was used

to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has been

opened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

If equipped with Keyless Access,this feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

Temporary Disable PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-50.



Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle toopen the liftgate when all doors areunlocked, or when all doors arelocked and the transmitter is within1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked, or when all doors arelocked and the transmitter is within1 m (3 ft).

See Liftgate on page 2-13.

Keyed Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Lockson page 2-11.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.

The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder orpassenger seat.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle. Then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE#2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray. Thetransmitter pocket/insert is in



front of the storage area next tothe center console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats.

5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press Kor Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton for approximately12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

7. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all transmitters to beprogrammed must be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key from thetransmitter.

2. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.



5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray. Thetransmitter pocket/insert is infront of the storage area next tothe center console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats.

6. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket/insert andpress K or Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton for approximately12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE. whenstarting the vehicle. See Key andLock Messages on page 5-42.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brakepedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. With the key removed, insert aflat, thin object in center of thetransmitter to separate andremove the back cover.

2. Lift the battery with a flat object.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside toward the back cover.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely depending on theoutside temperature.



The rear defog and heated andcooled seats, if equipped, may alsocome on. See Heated and CooledFront Seats on page 3-7 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:. The key is in the ignition (Key

Access) or the transmitter is inthe vehicle (Keyless Access).

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:. The coolant temperature gets

too high.. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may bereduced while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2 or VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. RepeatSteps 1 and 2 for a 10-minutetime extension.

Place the ignition in ON/RUN/START to operate the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 10 minutes, for a totalof 20 minutes, if during the first10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested, 30 seconds afterstarting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.



Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, all

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Use the key in the driver door.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Pushing down the manual lockknob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down themanual lock knob on apassenger door will lock onlythat door.

. Pulling an interior door handlewill unlock the door. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatches it.

Keyless Access

If equipped, the RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of the doorbeing opened. Press the button onthe door handle to open. See“Keyless Access Operation” inRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.



Key Cylinder Access

To access the key cylinder, insertthe key into slot on the bottom ofthe door handle and pry cover off.Replace cover when done bysnapping on tabs.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Delayed DoorLock” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-50.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Lockout ProtectionKeyed Ignition: When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the key in the ignition, all thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock. This can be



manually overridden by pressingand holding Q on the power doorlock switch.

Pushbutton Start: When lockingis requested with the driver dooropen and the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,all the doors will lock and then thedriver door will unlock. This can bemanually overridden by pressingand holding Q on the power doorlock switch.

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on, the vehicle is off with thedriver door open, and door lockingis requested, all the doors will lockand only the driver door will unlock.The Unlocked Door Anti-Lockoutfeature can be turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menus.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-28.

{ Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftglass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the RKE transmitter twice tounlock all doors. Press the touchpad (1) on the underside of theliftgate handle and lift up.

Press the button (2) above thelicense plate to open the liftglass,or pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter. Do not leave theliftglass open when raising theliftgate.

There will be a delay in the releaseof the liftglass if there is an attemptto open it while the rear wipers arein motion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate toautomatically unlock it. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.



Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You, or others, could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

If equipped, the switch is on theoverhead console. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The modes are:. MAX: Opens to maximum

height.. 3/4: Opens to a reduced height

that can be set from 3/4 to fullyopen. Use to prevent the liftgatefrom opening into overheadobjects such as a garage door orroof-mounted cargo. The liftgatecan be opened all the waymanuallly.

. OFF: Opens manually only.

To open or close the liftgate, selectMAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door mustbe unlocked.

. Press the touch pad on theoutside liftgate handle afterunlocking all doors. If equippedwith Keyless Access, a locked

vehicle can be opened if theRKE transmitter is within 1 m(3 ft) of the touch pad.

. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing again restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.The touch pad on the liftgate handlecannot be used to close the liftgate.



Do not manually force the liftgate toopen or close during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled in extremelylow temperatures, or after repeatedpower cycling over a short period oftime. If this occurs, the liftgate canstill be operated manually. SelectOFF on the liftgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate will continueto completion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Make surethe liftgate is closed and latchedbefore driving.

If the power liftgate support struthas lost pressure, the turn signalswill flash and a chime will soundwhile the liftgate automaticallycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the power liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacleprevents the liftgate from completelyclosing, the horn will sound as analert that the liftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the sideedges of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and thevehicle and presses against asensor, the liftgate will reverse

direction and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andopen the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl next to thelatch on the outside of theliftgate until the turn signals flashand a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.



Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at thebeginning of this section.

Hands-Free Operation

If equipped with Hands-Free VehicleAccess, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motionunder the rear bumper.

The liftgate will not operate if theRKE transmitter is not within1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use oneof the liftgate switches.

Length of Kick Zone

To operate, kick your foot straight upin one swift motion under the centerof the rear bumper, then pull it back.

{ Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF whencleaning or working near the rearbumper to avoid accidentalopening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close the



liftgate by another method orstart the vehicle. The feature willbe re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and achime will sound. Step away fromthe gate before it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

If equipped, the power assist stepswill deploy when the door is openedand automatically retractthree seconds after the door is

closed. The power assist steps willretract immediately if the vehiclestarts moving.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion. Thesteps will reverse direction if theyencounter an obstruction whenopening or closing. Remove theobstruction, then open and close thedoor on the same side to completethe motion of the assist steps. If theobstruction is not cleared, the assiststeps remain extended while driving.

There are two other modes ofoperation:

Deploy Mode: To extend bothpower assist steps for cleaning,pressj while the vehicle is in

P (Park) or N (Neutral). Pressjagain to retract them. The DIC willdisplay a message.

Lock Mode: Press and holdj forfour seconds to lock and disable thepower assist steps. Press andholdj for four seconds again toenable them. The DIC will display amessage.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, liftgate or the hood is open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle with one ofthree ways:. Use the RKE transmitter.. Use the Keyless Access

system.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash. Pressing Q on the RKEtransmitter a second time willbypass the 30-second delay andimmediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.



. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all

occupants have exited.. Always unlock a door with the

RKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages onpage 5-46.

Intrusion Sensor andInclination Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have an inclinationsensor and intrusion sensor.

The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:. Make sure all doors and

windows are completely closed.. Secure any loose items such as

a sunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking thesensors in the front overheadconsole.

. Close DVD screens beforeleaving the vehicle.

Intrusion and InclinationSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or the vehicle is beingtransported.



With the vehicle off, presso inthe front overhead console to turnoff the feature.

The indicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled untilthe next time the alarm system isarmed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispressed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start thevehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitteror place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert next to thecenter console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low Transmitter”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thecenter console, the vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

To power fold the mirrors:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may also have a turnsignal indicator on the mirror. Anarrow on the mirror flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsThe heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Thisbutton is on the climate controlpanel. Press to heat the mirror.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.



Automatic DimmingMirrorThe driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps from behind.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside rearviewmirror. It can show objects that maybe in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.



2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:. The vehicle is shifted out of

R (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe mirror will automatically reducethe glare of the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson each time the vehicle is started.



Child-View Mirror

If equipped, push up on thesunglasses bin and release. Pushthe bin back in halfway to securethe mirror in position.

Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.



The driver door has switches thatcontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door switch only controlsthat window. The power windowswork when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-25.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Express-Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress-down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing orpulling the switch.

Express-Up Window

If equipped, the driver windowexpress-up feature allows thewindow to be raised without holdingthe switch. Pull the window switchup fully and release it to activate theexpress-up feature. The express-upfeature can be canceled at any timeby briefly pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the driver power

window will need to bereprogrammed for the express-upfeature to work.

To reprogram the power windows:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START.

3. From any open position, pull thepower window switch up until thewindow is fully closed.

4. Hold the switch up forapproximately two seconds afterthe window is fully closed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when express-up is active,the window stops at the obstacleand auto-reverses to a presetfactory position. Weather conditionssuch as severe icing also cause thewindow to auto-reverse. The



window returns to normal operationonce the obstacle or condition isremoved.

Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ Warning

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode.Hold the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.The window rises for as long as theswitch is held. Once the switch isreleased, the express mode isreactivated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

. PressZ to activate the rearwindow locks. An indicator lightwill illuminate when the featureis on.

. PressZ again to deactivate therear window locks.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

1. Open or Close

2. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-25.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of switch (2) to ventthe sunroof.

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (1) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (1) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (1) until the sunroof reachesthe desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front ofswitch (1). Press the switch again tostop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-28When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-44Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-46Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-58


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraintcan be lowered to allow for bettervisibility when the rear seat isunoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securinga Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-4.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems on page 9-54.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.



. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," andB (Exit) buttons on the driver doorare used to manually store andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, power tilt andtelescoping steering column, andadjustable pedals.



Storing Memory Positions

To store positions to the “1” and “2”buttons:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt andtelescoping steering column, andadjustable pedals (if equipped)to the desired driving positions.

2. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

3. Immediately press and hold “1”until two beeps sound.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 for a seconddriver using “2.”

To store positions to theB (Exit)button and easy exit features:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power tilt andtelescoping steering column, andadjustable pedals (if equipped)to the desired positions forgetting out of the vehicle.

2. Press and release SET. A beepwill sound.

3. Immediately press and holdBuntil two beeps sound.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

If the vehicle is off or not in P (Park),press and hold "1," "2," orB tomanually recall the previouslystored memory positions. Releasing"1,” "2," orB before the storedpositions are reached stops therecall.

If the vehicle is on and in P (Park),press and release “1,” “2,” orB tomanually recall the previouslystored memory positions. Placingthe ignition in OFF/LOCK before thestored positions are reached stopsthe recall.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Memory Recall)

The Auto (Automatic) MemoryRecall feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored“1” or “2” position when entering thevehicle.

If the Auto Memory Recall feature isenabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu, then do oneof the following to recall the “1” or“2” position:

. Press K on the RKE transmitterand open the driver door.

. Press K on the RKE transmitterwhen the driver door isalready open.

. Press the lock/unlock button onthe outside driver door handleand open the driver door. TheRKE transmitter must be presentfor the recall to activate.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls; press thepower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn control; or press theadjustable pedal control.



RKE transmitters are not labeledwith a number. If your memory seatposition is stored to “1” or “2” butthis position is not automaticallyrecalling, then change the storedposition or switch RKE transmitterswith the other driver.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically moves thedriver seat, power tilt andtelescoping steering column,adjustable pedals, and outsidemirrors on some vehicles to thememory positions stored to theB(Exit) button. See “Storing MemoryPositions” previously in this section.See also Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is turned off and the

driver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat, power tilt and telescopingsteering column, and/or theadjustable pedals while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction. Thendo one of the following:. If automatically or manually

recalling the stored memoryposition, press and hold theappropriate manual control fortwo seconds. Try recalling againby pressing the appropriatememory button.

. If recalling the exit position,press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the exitfeature not recalling fortwo seconds. Then try recallingthe exit position again.

If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



The buttons are on the center stackbelow the climate control system. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

PressA to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andCooled Seats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside thecooled seats turn on. The heated orcooled seats are canceled when theignition is turned on. Press theheated or cooled seat button to usethe heated or cooled seats after thevehicle is started.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or cooled seats will notturn on during a remote start unlessthey are enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-9 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.



Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns.See the Warning under Heatedand Cooled Front Seats onpage 3-7.

The buttons are on the rear of thecenter console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator lights on thebutton show the setting: three forhigh, two for medium, and onefor low.

If the heated seats are on high foran extended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row Seats

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.



{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully while applyingpressure to the seatback, andthe seatback will return to theupright position. If the lever islifted without applying pressure,the seat will release to a foldedposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

The second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat.

Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safety

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

belts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.



2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.

4. The rear pull strap can also beused to fold or fold and tumblethe seat. It is easier to tumblethe seat with the rear pull straponce the seat is folded flat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:




2. Pull the strap on the bottom rearof the second row seat torelease the seatback. Theseatback will fold forward.

3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can move

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

when the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.



{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

Fold the seat to load cargo. Foldand tumble the seat for entry to thethird row.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seat releasebutton on the panel behind therear doors. The seatbackautomatically folds flat.

3. Press the button again torelease the rear of the seat fromthe floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power SeatButtons

2. Third Row Power Seat Buttons

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:




2. Press the button (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to fold theseatback.

The left button folds the leftseatback, and the right buttonfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the button again torelease the rear of the seat fromthe floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

The buttons (2) can be used to foldand unfold the third row seatbacksfrom the cargo area. See Third RowSeats on page 3-14.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until bothsides of the seat are latched tothe floor. Make sure the seat issecurely latched to the floorbefore raising the seatback.If both sides are not latched tothe floor, the seatback will notraise.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safety

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

belts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

The third row seatbacks can befolded to increase cargo space.




2. Third Row Power SeatButtons

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints onpage 3-2. Put the second rowseatback in the upright position.See Second Row Seats onpage 3-9

4. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.

5. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area tofold the seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

6. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to foldor fold and tumble the second rowseats from the cargo area. SeeSecond Row Seats on page 3-9.

Returning the Seatback to theUpright Position


2. Third Row Power SeatButtons



To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area toraise the seatback.

The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

4. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-17.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-39 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-41.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt, and the safety belt is notattached, see Third Row Seats onpage 3-14 for instruction onreconnecting the safety belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-33.



For front seating positions, if thewebbing locks in the latch platebefore it reaches the buckle, tiltthe latch plate flat to unlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If you findthat the latch plate will not gofully into the buckle, see if youare using the correct buckle.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-24.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belton smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.



For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing whenthe safety belt is not in use. Thelatch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thebelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-18.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-25.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Rear Outboard Seating Positions

There are comfort guides for therear outboard seating positions forthe second row and the third rowoutboard seating positions. Thecomfort guides are stored on a clipon the interior trim next to theoutboard seatback.

To install:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide on thefront.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto its storage clip.

Third Row Center Seating Position

Comfort guides for the third rowcenter seating position are availablefrom your dealer. Instructions areincluded with the guide.

An adjustable comfort guide is usedfor the center seating position in thethird row seat. The adjustablecomfort guide attaches to the headrestraint post on the inboard side ofthe left rear outboard seat.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-17.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-25.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-18.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A front center airbag for the

driver and front outboardpassenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-30.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-39 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-41.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-18.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The front center airbag is in theinboard side of the driver seatback.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-26. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag is designedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon thelocation of the impact, when eitherside of the vehicle is struck. Inaddition, the front center airbag isdesigned to inflate when thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, these



roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-28.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare also designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-30 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated. Thefront center airbag and roof-railairbags may still be at least partiallyinflated for some time after theyinflate. Some components of theairbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-28.



The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuel

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another



crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-19.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag under

certain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A front outboard passenger

takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-19.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle who



has outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infant

is present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-56 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-58.Even if the child restraint isequipped with a safety beltlock-off, make sure the safetybelt retractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor before tighteningthe safety belt. When the

retractor lock is set, the belt canbe tightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking feature willbe engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-37 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changingany parts of the front seats, safety



belts, airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, any airbag module, ceiling orpillar garnish trim, overheadconsole, front sensors, side impactsensors, airbag wiring, or frontcenter console.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of the frontoutboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on top

of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-33.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-59 foradditional information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-18.

{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-28. See yourdealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-18.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 3-19. If a comfort guideis not available, or if theshoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return tothe booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-19.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go all

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular

restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected by

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety



Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

front passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-33 for additionalinformation.



When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to

properly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCH



anchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce the

forward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row— 60/40

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Second Row— Bucket

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors for second row seats. Forthird row seats, the top tetheranchor symbol is on the flipperpanel. Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.



Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-46 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

anchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.



{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-46.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the safety beltsand top tether whenrecommended by the childrestraint manufacturer. Refer toyour child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.



1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access the toptether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, raise thehead restraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and in between thehead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetheraround the inboard oroutboard side of the headrestraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed or an adjustablehead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around the headrestraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt to

move it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seatson page 3-14 for additionalinformation.

2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up on thehead restraint.



3. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

4. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

5. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

6. Push the head restraint down.

7. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-47 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-46.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraint maybe removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-47.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle is being used.


4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If the head restraint was removedfor a third row outboard seatingposition, reinstall it before the

seating position is used. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-46.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-33 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-19 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbag

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-33 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-19.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.



4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-33 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

If equipped with storage behind theradio, press and holdP to open.There is a USB port inside. See theinfotainment manual.

Press and holdP again to close.Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.

The storage area cannot beoperated withP when valet modeis enabled. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

The storage area can be operatedmanually.

Glove BoxLift up the glove box handle to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersCupholders are in the front of theconsole. If equipped, cupholdersmay be in the second and third rowseat armrest areas.


4-2 Storage

To remove the cupholder forcleaning, press together the fronttop center of the cupholder and pullout from the chrome ring.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access. There may be achild-view mirror located within thesunglasses bin. Release the bin andthen push up halfway to secure inposition.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removabledivider to help organize.

Center Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USBports, an accessory power outlet,tote compartment, device holder,and SD card reader inside.

On the rear of the console, there isa High Voltage Power Outlet(HVPO), auxiliary jacks, and anopen storage area.

See Power Outlets on page 5-7 andthe infotainment manual.


Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

{ Warning

An unsecured cargo cover couldstrike people in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash. Store thecargo cover securely or remove itfrom the vehicle.

To use the cargo cover, if equipped:

1. Pull the cover handle toward therear of the vehicle.

2. Latch the cover posts into theretaining sockets on the cargoarea trim panels.

To return the cover to the retractedposition:

1. Pull up on the cover handle torelease the cover posts from theretaining sockets.

2. Let the cover move forward tothe full retracted position.

To remove the cover:

1. Let the cover go all the way intothe holder.

2. Then, grasping the driver sidecover end cap, push the coverend cap toward the passengerside of the vehicle.

3. Swing the cover rearward andtake it out of the vehicle.

To put the cover in the vehicle:

1. Make sure the cover slot in theholder faces rearward with theround surface facing down.

2. Then, hold the cover at an angleand place the cover end cap intothe slot in the passenger sidetrim panel.

3. Move the other end of the coverforward and hold it next to thedriver side trim panel slot.

4. Press the end caps in, to allowthe cover to fit into the trim slot.

5. Pull lightly on the cover holder tomake sure it is secure.

On long wheelbase models thereare two cover positions. The slotsfurthest forward allow the cover tobe used if the third seat is removedor folded down. The cover can beinstalled and removed fromeither side.

Cargo Tie-DownsIf equipped with cargo tie-downs inthe rear cargo area, these can beused to strap cargo down and keepit from moving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.


4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GMCertified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.

{ Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure itemsloaded on the roof of the vehicle donot block or damage the CHMSL.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Transmission TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-18Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-24Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-25Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-26Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-26

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-27

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-28Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-29Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-29Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-33

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-38Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-39Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-39Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-42Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-46Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Steering SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-47Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-50

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-50

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-58Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustmentPower Tilt and Telescope SteeringWheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescope steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel



( (Heated Steering Wheel): Pressto turn it on or off. A light next to thebutton displays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers arecontrolled by turning the bandwithz FRONT on it.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

3 INT (Intermittent Wipes): Turnthez FRONT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turnto8, then release. For several

wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-25.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved toOFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense™

With Rainsense, a sensor near thetop center of the windshield detectsthe amount of water on thewindshield and controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

3 INT (Rainsense WipeSensitivity): Turn thez FRONTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.



. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO (Rainsense On/Off):Press to turn Rainsense on or off.When turned on andz FRONT isin one of the Rainsense wipesensitivity positions the wipers canbe adjusted for more or less

sensitivity to moisture. When turnedoff, the wipers operate as timedintermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is on when the ignitionis turned on, or if the ignition is inON/RUN and thez FRONT bandis in one of the sensitivity settingswhenz AUTO is turned on or off,a message may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is in ON/RUNandz FRONT is not in one of the

sensitivity settings whenz AUTOis turned on, a message maydisplay indicating that the wiperband must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L m (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of the turnsignal lever to spray washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the paddle isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the paddle is



released, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF: Turns the wiper off.

INT (Intermittent Wipes): Turns onthe rear wiper with a delay betweenwipes.

ON (Rear Wipes): Turns on therear wiper.

= REAR (Rear Wiper Wash):Press this button on the end of thelever to spray washer fluid on therear window. The wipers will clearthe rear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFFto disable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically stop at the base of therear window.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.



CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5-38 for themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

Clock

Setting the Time and Date withFaceplate Controls

To set the time or date:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select the desired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob to increaseor decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the system willupdate and return to the Settingsmenu. Press o BACK to go tothe last menu and save thechanges.

Auto Set requires an OnStarsubscription.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob to select.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Setting the Time and Date withTouchscreen Controls

To set the time:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton from the Home Page,then press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Time and press« orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Press 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Press the } screen button to goback to the previous menu.



Auto Set requires an OnStarsubscription.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton from the Home Page,then press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Date and press« orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Clock Display and pressOFF or ON to turn the clockdisplay off or on.


Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fiveaccessory power outlets:

Vehicles with a Center Console. One in front of the cupholders on

the center console.. One inside the center storage

console.. One on the rear of the center

storage console.. One in the third row seat on the

driver side.. One in the rear cargo area on

the passenger side.

Vehicles with Bench Seats. One on the center stack below

the climate control system.. One in the storage area on the

bench seat.

. One on the rear of the centerarmrest storage.

. One in the third row seat area onthe driver side.

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:. The power outlet near the

cupholders for vehicles with acenter console or on the centerstack for vehicles with benchseats, can be configured tooperate using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) orbattery power modes. If thesepower outlets are used while inthe battery power mode, thiscould cause interferencebetween the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter and thevehicle, and the vehicle may notstart. See Ignition Positions onpage 9-20.



. The power outlets in the thirdrow seat area or in the rearcargo area are powered at alltimes. The power outlets insidethe storage area, on the rear ofthe console, or on the benchseat are only powered when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP isactive.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlet, if configured accordingly.Do not leave electrical equipmentplugged in when the vehicle is notin use because the vehicle couldcatch fire and cause injury ordeath.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF will drain the battery.Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 15 ampererating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-84.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet, itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

For vehicles with a center console,the 110 volt power outlet is on therear of the center console.

For vehicles with bench seats, the110 volt power outlet is on thecenter stack below the climatecontrols.

The 110 volt power outlet is on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the ignition off andthen back to ON/RUN. The powerrestarts when equipment using 150watts or less is plugged into theoutlet and a system fault is notdetected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.

. Medical equipment.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-30.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Settings

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.

If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Settings

Press V to select the Settings app,

then press p to enter the Settings

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Settings menu.

Units: Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English, Imperial, or metricunits by pressing V while the



desired item is highlighted.A checkmark will be displayed nextto the selected item.

Display Themes: There are threeinstrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard, Technology, and Media.

Info Pages: Press p while InfoPages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

Speed Warning: The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning is

displayed. Pressw orx to adjust

the value. Press V to set the speed.Once the speed is set, this featurecan be turned off by pressing Vwhile viewing this page. If theselected speed limit is exceeded, apop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Software Information: Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.



Fuel Gauge

Standard Theme Shown

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric, Standard Theme Shown



English, Standard Theme Shown

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oilpressure. Check the vehicle's oil assoon as possible. See “OILPRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-40 and Engine Oil onpage 10-6.

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge





This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

TransmissionTemperature Gauge



This gauge appears when thevehicle is in Tow/Haul Mode andshows the transmission fluidtemperature. If the gauge is readingin the red area and/or a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle must bestopped and the cause checked.One possible cause is a low fluidlevel in the transmission.

See Transmission Messages onpage 5-47.



{ Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

Voltmeter Gauge

Standard Theme Shown

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light onpage 5-20 for more information. Thevoltmeter gauge may also readlower when in fuel economy mode.This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner and unplug allchargers and accessories.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.



When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-33.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3-26.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-46.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-33 for

important safety information. Thepassenger airbag status indicator isin the overhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the status

indicator will light either ON or OFF,or the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, as

a check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-37.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissions

are at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-20.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system also



assists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-68. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-66.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This can



happen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-77.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-23 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5-38.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen the transfer case is shiftedinto four-wheel drive and the front

axle engages. LO or HI will also benext to this light when the vehicle isin four-wheel low or four-wheel high.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-35.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-34.



Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

This light is green if LDW is on andready to operate.

This light changes to amber andflashes to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-65.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-58.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.




StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.



{ Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating onpage 10-16.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-46. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-48.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-51.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-21.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-5 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

See Cruise Control on page 9-44.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) ison and ready, and turns green when



the ACC is set and active. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control onpage 9-47.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Clusteron page 5-11. The displays showthe status of many vehicle systems.The controls for the DIC are on theright steering wheel control.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V (Set/Reset): Press to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theSettings application.

3. Press V to enter theSettings menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to move throughthe list of possible informationdisplays.



6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark willappear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Settingsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed: Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed:Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and theaverage speed. Or press p andselect reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy: Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-27.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.



Timer and Fuel Used: Can beused as a timer. To start the timer,press V while this display is active.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset. To stop the timer,press V briefly while this display isactive and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold V while this display is active.

This also shows the number ofliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel usedsince the last reset of thismenu item.

Oil Life: Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-40. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-6. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Tire Pressure: Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10-50 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-51.

Best Fuel Economy: Displaysaverage fuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V whilethis display is active to reset thebest fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers: Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in orderfrom highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.



Economy Trend: Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index: Provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The bar graph shows avalue that is based on current fuelconsumption compared to what isexpected from the vehicle with goodand bad driving habits. It also showsif the Active Fuel Management isactive and in V4 mode, or inactiveand in V8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-27.

Engine Hours: Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.This display also shows the engineidle hours.

Trailer Brake: Displays on vehicleswith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT displayif a trailer is not connected.

Speed Signs: Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Off Road: Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Following Distance: Used toselect the alert timing for theForward Collision Alert (FCA). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-58.

Blank Page: Shows noinformation.

Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge: Shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield. The image isprojected through the HUD lens ontop of the instrument panel. Theinformation appears as an imagefocused out toward the front of thevehicle.



{ Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50 and“Cluster Settings Menu” underInstrument Cluster on page 5-11.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:. Speed. Tachometer. Audio. Phone. Navigation. Collision Alert. Cruise Control

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may becleared by using the steering wheelcontrols. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-37.

Some information shown may notbe available on your vehicle if it isnot equipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.



3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ (Image Adjustment): Pressdown or lift up to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

! (Display View): Press toselect the display view. Each presswill change the display view.

D (Image Brightness): Lift upand hold to brighten the display.Press down and hold to dim thedisplay. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.

Metric

English

Speed View: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), speed limit, AdaptiveCruise Control speed, LaneDeparture Warning, and vehicleahead indicator. Some information

only appears on vehicles that havethese features, and when they areactive.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View: This displaysthe speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.



All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearingin the instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing inthe instrument cluster may alsodisplay in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation View: This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. Thecompass heading is displayed whennavigation routing is not active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View: This displaysthe speedometer reading, rpmreading, transmission positions, andgear shift indicator.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:. Nothing is covering the

HUD lens.. HUD brightness setting is not

too dim or too bright.. HUD is adjusted to the proper

height.



. Polarized sunglasses arenot worn.

. Windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement on page 10-26.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset).

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimes willsound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thebattery voltage drops belowexpected levels and features aredisabled. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessory features.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5-20. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

TRANSPORT MODE ON

This message is displayed when thevehicle is in transport mode. Somefeatures can be disabled while inthis mode, including RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), remote start,and the vehicle alarm system. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for serviceto turn transport mode off.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-19.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimemay sound when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turn theignition back on. If this message stilldisplays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See yourdealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-77 for moreinformation.

Compass MessagesDashes may be displayed if thevehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).



Cruise Control Messages

ADAPTIVE CRUISE SETTO XXX

This message displays when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)speed is set. See Adaptive CruiseControl on page 9-47.

ADAPTIVE CRUISETEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) when it istemporarily unavailable. The ACCsystem does not need service.

This can occur under the followingconditions:. Cruise is turned on when the

vehicle is stopped.. The radar cannot see objects

well. See the next message.

FRONT RADAR BLOCKED –SEE OWNERS MANUAL

This message can display when:. The radar is not clean. Keep the

radar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of thevehicle. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-81.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control speed is set. SeeCruise Control on page 9-44.

NO CRUISE BRAKING GASPEDAL APPLIED

This message displays whenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isactive and the driver is pressing thegas pedal. When this occurs, ACCwill not brake. See Adaptive CruiseControl on page 9-47.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem. Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), Forward Collision Alert(FCA), and/or the Active EmergencyBraking System may not work. Donot use these systems until thevehicle has been repaired.

SHIFT TO PARK BEFOREEXITING

This message may display ifAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isengaged holding the vehicle at astop, and the driver attempts to exitthe vehicle. Put the vehicle inP (Park) before exiting.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if a door is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for



obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display when theliftgate is open. Close the liftgatecompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5-15. To avoid

added strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-15.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-34.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10-9 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10-6 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.



ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-6.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-15.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon as

possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10-6.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimemay sound when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10-16for more information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime

this message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge on page 5-14 and Fuelon page 9-66.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the malfunction indicator lampon the instrument cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-20. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9-68. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into the



atmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

NO REMOTE DETECTEDPRESS BRAKE TO RESTART

This message displays whenattempting to turn off the vehicleand the RKE transmitter is no longerdetected. Restarting is allowedwithout the RKE transmitter forfive minutes. Press the brake pedalto restart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

AUTOMATIC COLLISIONPREP OFF

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemhas been turned off. See ActiveEmergency Braking System onpage 9-60.

AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPREDUCED

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemhas been set to the Alert setting.This setting disables most automaticbraking functions of the AutoCollision Preparation feature. Some



last-second automatic brakingcapability is still provided with theAlert setting, but braking is lesslikely to occur. See ActiveEmergency Braking System onpage 9-60.

AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemhas been unavailable for some time.The Active Emergency BrakingSystem does not need service.

This can occur under the followingconditions:. The radar is not clean. Keep the

radar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of thevehicle. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-81.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

This message may also bedisplayed if there is a problem withthe StabiliTrak system.

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert has beenturned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warningsystem will not operate. AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), and the ActiveEmergency Braking System may notwork or may not work as well.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system

when it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

SERVICE AUTOMATICCOLLISION PREP

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),Forward Collision Alert (FCA), andActive Emergency Braking Systemmay not work. Do not use thesesystems until the vehicle has beenrepaired.



SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)features. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the Lane ChangeAlert and Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) systems off.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Lane Change Alert, SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) featureswill not work. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that LaneChange Alert, Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) are disabled either becausethe sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in the blind zone,or the vehicle is passing through anopen area, such as the desert,where there is insufficient data foroperation. This message may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. The vehicle does notneed service. For cleaning, see"Washing the Vehicle" underExterior Care on page 10-81.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE LEVELING SYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Magnetic RideControl™ suspension system orAutomatic Level Control, thismessage displays when the levelingsystem is not operating properly.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If this message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.



SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Magnetic RideControl suspension system, thismessage displays when thesuspension system is not operatingproperly. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage displays, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-41.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

This message may come on if theStabiliTrak system has not fullyinitialized because of roadconditions or the incorrect tire size.When the StabiliTrak system is fullyinitialized, the message will turn off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-41. If thismessage continues to be displayedfor multiple ignition cycles and ondifferent road surfaces, see yourdealer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when thetraction control has been turned off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-41.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when thetraction control is active. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system has been turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.To limit wheel spin and realize thefull benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you should

normally leave StabiliTrak on. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41.

STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.Several conditions can cause thismessage to appear:. If the system is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. If the brake system warning lightis on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5-23.

. If the stability system takeslonger than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. If an engine or vehicle-relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

. If the transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low.



The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart, so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-21.

Steering SystemMessages

STEERING ASSIST ISREDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE

This message may display if aproblem occurs with the electricpower steering system. If thismessage appears, steering effortmay be slightly higher than normal.The vehicle is still safe to drive. Usecaution while in reduced assistmode. If this message is persistentor appears repeatedly, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Steering on page 9-4.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when thereis a problem with electric powersteering. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See Steering onpage 9-4.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5-27. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-51.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis relearning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe relearned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10-54,Tire Rotation on page 10-55, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10-50, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays with a vehicle pictureto indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-27. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-41, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-48. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

Transmission Messages

4WD OFF

If equipped with four-wheel drive,this message displays when thefour-wheel-drive system istemporarily disabled due to anoverheated condition. The vehiclewill run in two-wheel drive when thismessage is present. Once thefour-wheel-drive system cools down,the message turns off and thefour-wheel-drive system returns tonormal operation.

4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS

This message will display while thefour-wheel-drive system is shifting.

FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is notin N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).



FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.

GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE

This message displays when gradebraking has been activated whiledriving on downhill grades. Thismessage will only appear the firsttime the feature is activated in anignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-34, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-29, andCruise Control on page 9-44.

GRADE BRAKING OFF

This message displays when gradebraking has been disabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-34, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-29, andCruise Control on page 9-44.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when gradebraking has been enabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-34, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-29, andCruise Control on page 9-44.

SERVICE 4WD

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Make sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at leastone minute, then restart the vehicleand check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when theshift lever is in M (Manual Mode)and a transmission range has beenselected that is unavailable at thecurrent vehicle speed.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, and the vehicle speed iscorrect, but the transmission is notin N (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOWTO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n isrequested, but the vehicle speed istoo high, this message will displayuntil the correct vehicle speed isreached.



TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

When towing, use Tow/Haul Modeto prevent damage to the engine ortransmission. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-34.

VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

This message will display if thevehicle is driven in 4 n for about10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:. A trailer with electric brakes

becomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-77.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric or electric overhydraulic brakes is first connectedto the vehicle.



This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT displays appearin the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-30 and “Integrated TrailerBrake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9-77.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10-18 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Radio Audio System Controls

1. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Press o BACK on the faceplate

or the 0 screen button to returnto the previous menu or exit.

Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN toaccess the Settings menu, thenselect SETTINGS from the HomePage on the infotainment systemdisplay.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Time and Date. Language (Language). Valet Mode. Teen Driver. Radio. Vehicle. Bluetooth. Voice. Display. Rear Camera. Return to Factory Settings. Software Information

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock on page 5-6.



Language (Language)

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition (if equipped) will reflectthe selected language.

Valet Mode (If Equipped)

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit top speed, power,and access to vehicle storagelocations (if equipped).

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Press Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Press Back to goback to the previous menu.

Teen Driver (If Equipped)

Press and the following maydisplay:. View Report Card. Manage Settings. Change PIN. Key Registration. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN

View Report Card

This allows the driver’s drivinghabits to be viewed. See “TeenDriver” in “Settings” in theinfotainment manual.

Manage Settings

Press and the following maydisplay:. Audio Volume Limit. Teen Driver Speed Limiter. Teen Driver Speed Warning

Audio Volume Limit

This allows a maximum radiovolume to be set.

Select Off or On.

Teen Driver Speed Limiter

If equipped, this allows themaximum speed limit of the vehicleto be set.

Select Off or On.

Teen Driver Speed Warning

This allows a warning to be setwhen a certain speed is exceeded.

Select Off or On.

Change PIN

This allows the PersonalIdentification Number (PIN) to bechanged. See “Teen Driver” in“Settings” in the infotainmentmanual.



Key Registration

This allows the key to be registered.See “Register or Unregister a Key”in “Teen Driver” in the infotainmentmanual.

Clear All Teen Keys/PIN

This allows all Teen Driver keys andthe PIN to be cleared.

Select Continue or Cancel.

Radio

Press to display the Radio menuand the following may display:. Manage Favorites. Number of Favorites Shown. Audible Touch Feedback. Bose AudioPilot. Auto Volume. Maximum Startup Volume. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, press +or − to increase or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume ofaudio files played at system startupand shutdown.

Select On, then press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.



Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:. Climate and Air Quality. Collision/Detection Systems. Comfort and Convenience. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may display:. Auto Fan Max Speed. Auto Compartment Zone Temp. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

This feature allows for selection ofthe compartment zone temperaturesetting when the vehicle isrestarted.

Select Single Zone, Dual Zone,or Last Setting.

Auto Defog

When set to on, the front defog willautomatically come on when thevehicle is started.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay display:. Alert Type

. Auto Collision Preparation

. Park Assist

. Side Blind Zone Alert

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Auto Collision Preparation

This feature will turn on or off theForward Collision Alert feature aswell as the automatic brakingcapability of the Auto CollisionPreparation feature. With the Alertand Brake setting, both ForwardCollision Alert as well as theautomatic braking capability of theAuto Collision Preparation featureare available. The Alert settingdisables most automatic brakingfunctions of the Auto Collision



Preparation feature. Somelast-second automatic brakingcapability is still provided with theAlert setting, but it is much lesslikely to be triggered by most drivingconditions. Off disables all ForwardCollision Alert and automaticbraking capabilities of the AutoCollision Preparation feature.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.See ”Auto Collision Preparation” inObject Detection System Messageson page 5-42.

Park Assist

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing onpage 9-55.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) on page 9-62.

Select Off or On.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing onpage 9-55.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may display:. Auto Memory Recall. Easy Exit Options. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Auto Mirror Folding. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Auto Memory Recall

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Memory Seats onpage 3-5.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Memory Seats onpage 3-5.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside rearviewmirrors will automatically fold orunfold when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter Q or Kbutton is pressed and held.



Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is on,the rear wiper will automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is shiftedto R (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps when K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed to locate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open and the key is in theignition. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following may display:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Passive Door Unlock. Passive Door Lock. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.



Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth

Select and the following maydisplay:. Pair New Device. Device Management. Ringtones. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.



Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT or press the EDITbutton. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE or press the SAVEbutton.

Voice

Select and the following maydisplay:. Prompt Length. Audio Feedback Speed

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display

Select and the following maydisplay:. Mode. Calibrate Touchscreen. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera

Select and the following maydisplay:. Guidance Lines. Rear Cross Traffic Alert. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking on page 9-55.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Select to turn Off or On.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking on page 9-55.



Return to Factory Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Restore Vehicle Settings. Clear All Private Data. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight goes from a slow to a rapidflashing light. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, then

programming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.



Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door opener receiver

does not flash, press and holdthe same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long

enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.


6-2 Lighting

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps, parkinglamps, taillamps, instrument panellights, roof marker lamps (ifequipped), and license plate lamps.

When the vehicle is turned off andthe headlamps are in AUTO, theheadlamps turn off. When the key isremoved, the headlampsautomatically come on for a settime. The time of the delay can bechanged using the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps with the parking lampsand instrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlampsstay on for an additional 10 minutes.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer$ (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from low tohigh beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.


Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, off will only work whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


6-4 Lighting

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-6.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.


Lighting 6-5

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more than

one second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses on page 10-31.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

If equipped with fog lamps, thebutton is on the exterior lampcontrol, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument cluster.


6-6 Lighting

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination): Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF: Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON: Turns all dome lamps on.


Lighting 6-7

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps inthe overhead console and theheadliner, if equipped. To operate,the ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionor using Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When a door is opened, the domelamps and puddle lamps come on ifthe dome lamp control is in theDOOR position. If the dome lampcontrol is in the OFF position, thelamps do not come on.

The headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, and back-up lamps turnon briefly at night, or in areas withlimited lighting, when K is pressedon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. After about 30 secondsthe exterior lamps turn off. Entrylighting can be disabled manually bychanging the ignition out of the OFFposition, or by pressing the RKEtransmitter Q button.


6-8 Lighting

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back-up lamps, license platelamps, and interior lamps come onat night, or in areas with limitedlighting, when the driver door isopened after the ignition is turnedoff. The exterior lamps and interiorlamps remain on after the door isclosed for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltagemoving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


Lighting 6-9

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-37.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.


6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.


7-2 Infotainment System

2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Climate ControlSystems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system the heating,cooling, and ventilation in thevehicle can be controlled. Someclimate control settings can bechanged. See “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger Temperature Control


8. Air Recirculation

9. Rear Climate Control PowerButton

10. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

11. Front Climate Control PowerButton

12. Rear Fan Control

13. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control

14. Rear Temperature Control

15. RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout)

16. Rear Window Defogger

17. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)


8-2 Climate Controls

Front Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and theselected settings are displayed.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith 22°C (72°F) and allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the air delivery mode.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature): Press to link thepassenger and rear climatetemperature settings to the driversetting. The SYNC indicator light willturn on. When the passenger or rearclimate settings are adjusted, theSYNC indicator light turns off.

Air Delivery Mode Control:PressY,\,[ , or- to changethe direction of the airflow. Anindicator light comes on in theselected mode button.



Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents. The system automaticallyforces outside air into the vehicle

and the air conditioning compressorwill run, unless the outsidetemperature is close to freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents on page 8-6.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning isenabled. If the fan is turned off, theair conditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of thevehicle. It can also be used to helpreduce outside air and odors thatenter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidity

inside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The defogger turns off if theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.



{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Heated Mirror: If equipped withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2-22.

Rear Climate Controls

O (On/Off): Press to turn the rearclimate control system on or off.

AUTO: Press AUTO to control therear passenger temperature, airdelivery, and fan speed. AUTOappears in the display whenautomatic operation is active. If anyof the climate control settings

except rear temperature aremanually adjusted, this cancels fullautomatic operation.

Fan Control: Press up or down toincrease or decrease the rearpassenger area fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Pressto change the direction of the rearpassenger airflow. Repeatedly pressthe switch until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiplepresses will cycle through thedelivery selections.

Temperature Control: Press up ordown to increase or decrease theairflow temperature into the rearpassenger area.

RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout): Press to lock or unlockcontrol of the rear climate controlsystem from the rear seatpassengers. When locked, the rearclimate control can only be adjustedfrom the front seat.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely, depending on theoutside temperature. The rearwindow defogger and heated seats,if equipped, may also come on. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-9and Heated and Cooled Front Seatson page 3-7.

Sensors

The solar sensor monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.



There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of thevehicle, including a snowplow, couldcause a false reading in thedisplayed temperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Rear Climate ControlSystemThe rear climate control system islocated on the rear of the centerconsole storage. The rear climatesettings can be adjusted with thissystem.

1. Fan Control


3. MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl)

4. TEMP (Temperature Control)

5. Heated Rear Seats

If the dual automatic climate controlsystem rear climate control lockoutfeature is locked, the rear climatecontrol settings can only beadjusted from the front seat.

Automatic Operation

AUTO: Press AUTO to control theinside temperature, air delivery, andfan speed. A is indicated in thedisplay when automatic operation isactive. If any of the climate controlsettings are manually adjusted, thiscancels full automatic operation.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turncompletely counterclockwise to turnthe fan/power off.

TEMP (Temperature Control):Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the airflowtemperature into the passengerarea. If the SYNC button is pressedon the front climate controls, therear climate temperature is linked tothe driver temperature setting.



MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

M or L (Heated Rear Seats, IfEquipped): Press M or L to heatthe left or right outboard seatcushion. See Heated Rear Seats onpage 3-9.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-13.

1. Open the glove box completely.

2. Disconnect the glove box doordampener string from the glovebox door assembly. A pen orpencil may be inserted throughthe end of the dampener stringto prevent the string fromslipping inside the doorassembly.

3. Remove the six screws andremove the access plate.



4. Release the two tabs holding theservice door. Open the servicedoor and remove the old filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-19Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-27

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-40

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-44

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-47

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver AssistanceSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Active Emergency BrakingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . 9-62Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-67Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-16.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Steering SystemMessages on page 5-46. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.



Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Formore contact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see theLimited Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

lose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam. However, driving without theair dam reduces fuel economy.

{ Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper air flow to theengine. Re-attach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see If the Vehicle IsStuck on page 9-13 and Tires onpage 10-41.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9-27.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain ahead

cannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.



. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on thetransfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.



3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

{ Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes and thevehicle can stall. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,

suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-41.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

loss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.

Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-41.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-38.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of a

curve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.



{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems.”

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-28.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

The Traction Control System (TCS)can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-41. If TCS cannot free thevehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out” following.



{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10-62.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four-Wheel DriveHigh. Turn the TCS off. Shift backand forth between R (Reverse) anda forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shifting

gears. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-77.Recovery hooks can be used,if equipped.

Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

{ Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the vehicle has recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, use them ifthe vehicle is stuck off-road andneeds to be pulled some place tocontinue driving.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver door

open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10-41 and Tire Pressureon page 10-48.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for



the front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-73 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelshows the size of your vehicle'soriginal tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).



The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change your

weight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else –they go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they'll keep going.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There's also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving onpage 9-6.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yet

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

broken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9-73 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.



No adjustment to the pedals can bemade when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or while using cruisecontrol.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is to the left of the steeringwheel.

Press the switch to the left to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the switch to the right to movethe pedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you. Whiledriving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats on page 3-5.

Ignition Positions

Vehicles with Keyless Access havepushbutton starting.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights): Whenthe vehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-25.



If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages onpage 5-47. When the vehicle isshifted into P (Park), the ignitionsystem will switch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the vehicle isswitched to OFF and either frontdoor is opened. A sound may beheard as the lock actuates orreleases. The steering column lockmay not release with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,the vehicle may not start. Move thesteering wheel from left to rightwhile attempting to start the vehicle.If this does not work, the vehicleneeds service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto OFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition switch to the OFFposition.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-39.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.



The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9-22. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.

The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-84.

Starting Procedure (KeyAccess)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the low fuel warning lampis on and the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage is displayed in the



Driver Information Center (DIC),hold the ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18°C or 0°F), it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor andholding it there while holding thekey in START for up to15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to

allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. Press theENGINE START/STOP buttonwith the brake pedal applied.When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or the RKE batteryis low, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will display amessage. See Key and LockMessages on page 5-42.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press the ENGINE



START/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. There may be an internalthermostat in the plug end of the

cord, which will prevent enginecoolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is bythe left front fender, next to theengine compartment fuse block.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, do notuse it. See your dealer for areplacement. Inspect the cord fordamage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause an electricshock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extension cordin good operating condition,or using a damaged heater orextension cord, could make it

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heater cordand thermostat damage couldoccur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattach thecover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away from anymoving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep it

away from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped). Accessory Power Outlets. The

console and center seat outletsare RAP powered.

These features work when the keyis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,

the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

P (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-70.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9-39.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear— not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9-25.



When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-74.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.



When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30 for more information onusing this display.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-25and Engine Exhaust on page 9-28.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-70.

AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition key isturned to the ON/RUN position.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9-32.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice an

increase in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9-25.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-25 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-70.



{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9-25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-13.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.



Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9-5.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.

In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows selection of a range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If equipped, see “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9-32.

{ Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

If equipped with a gasoline engineand an automatic transmission,Normal Mode Grade Braking isenabled when the vehicle is started,but is not enabled in RangeSelection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speeds



when driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. The first timethe system engages for eachignition key cycle, a DIC messagewill be displayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-47.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-47.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-34and Cruise Control on page 9-44.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Tap the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

Hold the plus/minus buttons on theshift lever to select the highest orlowest range available for thecurrent vehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the M,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in M (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when 5 (Fifth) isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe transmission, but 6 (Sixth)cannot be used until the plus/minusbutton on the shift lever is used tochange to the range.



In vehicles with gasoline engines, when the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a downshift may occur. The gear that thetransmission is operating in when the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode) determines if a downshift occurs. See the following chart.

Gear beforeshifting from D(Drive) to M(Manual Mode)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haul notengaged

M6 M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M2 M1

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toM (Manual Mode)– Tow/Haulengaged

M6 M5 M4 M3 M3 M3 M2 M1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-34.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

{ Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery, such as withice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select M2 using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels and help toprevent the tires from spinning.



Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This providesincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and enhanced transmissionand engine cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5-24 and Hill and MountainRoads on page 9-11.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9-77.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9-32. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by using theengine and transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-47.

See Towing Equipment onpage 9-77.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-29 and Cruise Control onpage 9-44.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction. Read the appropriatesection for transfer case operationbefore using.

{ Caution

Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extendedperiod of time may causepremature wear on the system.The damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive may:. Cause a vibration to be felt in

the steering system.. Cause tires to wear faster.. Make the transfer case harder to

shift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9-39.

{ Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak® off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41.

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the transfer case knob next tothe steering wheel to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

Indicator lights display which settingthe transfer case is in. N (Neutral) isindicated on the knob. The indicatorlights will display briefly when the



ignition is turned on and one willstay on. If the lights displaymomentarily when the ignition is inON/RUN, but none stay on, theknob may have been turned whilethe vehicle was off. To see theindicator, turn the knob to anotherposition so that it matches theactual transfer case setting. If nolights display, take the vehicle toyour dealer for service. An indicatorlight flashes while shifting thetransfer case and remainsilluminated when the shift iscomplete.

If the transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting. Turn the knobback to the previous transfer casesetting to see the indicator.

The settings are:

N (Neutral): Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-77 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10-77.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle'spower is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 nwhen driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from4 n. The indicator light will flashwhile shifting and will remain onwhen the shift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).



To shift into 4 n:1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN

and the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the

4 n indicator light to stop flashingbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

{ Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to display the indicator. Withthe vehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission inN (Neutral) and the ignition inON/RUN. It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or2 m indicator light to stop flashingbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

{ Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),and the transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the brake pedal. SeeParking Brake on page 9-39.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.



4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the 4 n position. TheN (Neutral) light will come onwhen the transfer case shift toN (Neutral) is complete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park). SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-77.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe brake pedal.


3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desired gear.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-24.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-23.



{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-70.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.

Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have anHSA feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automatically



activated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure fora maximum of two seconds toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied within the two-secondwindow. If the vehicle is equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, HSA mayalso apply the trailer brakes. It willnot activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse). There may besituations on minor hills (less than5% grade) with a loaded vehicle orwhile pulling a trailer where HSAmay activate.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.

StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9-84.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.



It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-13 and “Turning theSystems Off and On” later in thissection.

When the transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled,the StabiliTrak OFF light comes on,and the appropriate message willappear on the DIC. Both tractioncontrol and StabiliTrak areautomatically disabled in thiscondition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.



To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-44. To turn TCS on again,press and release the g button. The

traction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrumentcluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5-44.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

the StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) onpage 9-84 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)on page 9-40.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

Magnetic Ride ControlThis vehicle may have a semi-activedamping system called MagneticRide Control. With this feature,

improved vehicle ride and handlingis provided under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.

Magnetic Ride Control is fullyautomatic and uses a computercontroller to continuously monitorvehicle speed, wheel to bodyposition, lift/dive, and steeringposition of the vehicle. Thecontroller then sends signals toeach shock absorber toindependently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Magnetic Ride Control also interactswith the Tow/Haul Mode that, whenactivated, will provide additionalcontrol of the shock absorbers. Thisadditional control results in betterride and handling characteristicswhen the vehicle is loaded or towinga trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode”under Towing Equipment onpage 9-77.



Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension is available on light-dutyvehicles and comes as a part of theMagneRide suspension, if equipped.Automatic Level Control (ALC) mayalso be available as a stand alonefeature.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up to10 minutes after the ignition key hasbeen turned off. You may hear theair compressor operating when theheight is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.



For an explanation of how cruisecontrol interacts with the RangeSelection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode,and Grade Braking systems. See“Grade Braking” underTow/HaulMode on page 9-34.

This vehicle has StabiliTrak andwhen the system begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41. If a collisionalert occurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System on page 9-58.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.

5 (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument cluster.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press briefly toset the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate): Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press to resume that speed or pressand hold to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, SET− or+RES control could get pressed andgo into cruise when not desired.Keep the cruise 5 button off whencruise is not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument cluster will come ongreen after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.



The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster on page 5-11.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor* is applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the +RES button

until the vehicle accelerates tothe desired speed, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5-11. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

until the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press SET–.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing the SET– button will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed. When goingdownhill, Cruise Grade Brakinghelps maintain the driver selectedspeed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for three seconds. A DICmessage displays. SeeTransmission Messages onpage 5-47.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-29 andTow/Haul Mode onpage 9-34.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if the 5 buttonis pressed or the ignition isturned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows the driver toselect the cruise control set speed

and following gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.The following gap is the followingtime between your vehicle and avehicle detected directly ahead inyour path, moving in the samedirection. If no vehicle is detected inyour path, ACC works like regularcruise control. ACC uses a radarsensor. See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13-12.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can apply acceleration orlimited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If ACC is controlling your vehiclespeed when the traction controlsystem (TCS) or electronic stabilitycontrol system activates, the ACCmay automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-41. When roadconditions allow ACC to be safelyused, the ACC can be turnedback on.



ACC will not engage if the TCS orelectronic stability control system isdisabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.Also see “Alerting the Driver” inthis section. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

{ Warning

Adaptive Cruise Control will notdetect or brake for children,pedestrians, animals, or otherobjects.

Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snow conditions.Adaptive Cruise Controlperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.

5 (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator turnswhite on the instrument clusterwhen ACC is turned on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to resume the previousset speed or hold to accelerate.If ACC is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET– (Set/Coast): Press briefly toset the speed and activate ACC.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.



* (Cancel): Press to disengageACC without erasing the selectedset speed.

3 (Follow Distance Gap): Pressto select a following gap time (ordistance) setting for ACC of Far,Medium, or Near.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, the cruise on/off control couldget pressed and cruise control couldbecome active when not desired.Keep the cruise control off whencruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.

ACC will not set or resume at aspeed less than 25 km/h (16 mph).

To set ACC:

1. Press5.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET– .

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

The ACC indicator displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) inthe instrument cluster and Head-Updisplay (HUD), if equipped. WhenACC is active, the indicator turnsgreen.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press+RES on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:. Use the accelerator to get to the

higher speed. Press SET– .Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden.A warning message will appearon the Driver Information Center



(DIC) and HUD, if equipped. SeeCruise Control Messages onpage 5-39.

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired set speed appears onthe display, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes to the next 1 km/h(1 mph) faster mark on thespeedometer.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, then the vehiclespeed will increase to the set speed.


Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:. Use the brake to get to the

desired lower speed. PressSET– and release theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the lowerspeed.

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET−. For each press, thevehicle speed goes to the next1 km/h (1 mph) slower mark onthe speedometer.


Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press3 on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Whenpressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the instrumentcluster and HUD, if equipped.Subsequent presses cycle the3button through three settings: Far,Medium, or Near. The gap settingwill be maintained until it ischanged.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditionswhen selecting the following gap.



The range of selectable gaps maynot be appropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9-58.

Alerting the Driver

Without Head-Up Display

With Head-Up Display

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, six redlights or the collision alert symbol onthe HUD, if equipped, will flash onthe windshield, and either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead symbol is in theinstrument cluster and HUD,if equipped.

The vehicle ahead symbol onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this symbol is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected follow gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases tofollow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automaticbraking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.



Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your completeattention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand you will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle when:. Your vehicle speed goes below

the minimum speed of 16 km/h(10 mph).

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or electronic stabilitycontrol system has activated orbeen disabled.

. No traffic or other objects arebeing detected.

. There is a fault in the system.

A message will appear on the DICindicating that cruise is disengaging.

The ACC active symbol will not bedisplayed when ACC is no longeractive.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, a warning messagein the DIC and in the HUD,

if equipped, will indicate thatautomatic braking will not occur.See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-37. ACC will resumeoperation when the acceleratorpedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control of

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be readyto use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadsymbol will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.



Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills. Thedriver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing atrailer. If the brakes are applied, theACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The radar sensor on the front of thevehicle can become blocked bysnow, ice, dirt, or mud. This areaneeds to be cleaned for ACC tooperate properly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care on page 10-81.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Drivingon page 9-3.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),Front Park Assist (FPA), and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may helpthe driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehiclewhen parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press abutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of 8 km/h (5 mph). The rearvision camera is above the licenseplate.



1. View Displayed by theCamera

1. View Displayed by theCamera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display onthe RVC screen to show where theRPA has detected an object. Thistriangle changes from amber to redand increases in size the closer theobject.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object located outside thecamera's field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Perceived distances may bedifferent from actual distances.Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen. Failure touse proper care before backingmay result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Always checkbehind and around the vehiclebefore backing.

Parking Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehiclewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off

the ground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humidweather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also causefalse detections. Keep the sensorsclean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, andslush; and clean sensors after a carwash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.



The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for RPA, and onsome vehicles, FPA. As the objectgets closer, more bars light up andthe bars change color from yellow toamber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound from

the front or rear depending onobject location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle witha left or right pointing arrow on theRVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound from the left or right orthree Safety Alert Seat pulses occuron the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button to the left of thesteering wheel is used to turn on oroff the Front and Rear ParkingAssist. The indicator light in thebutton comes on when the featuresare on and turns off when thefeatures have been disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist canbe turned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Parking Assist” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50. If theparking assist is turned off throughvehicle personalization, the parkingassist button will be disabled. Toturn the parking assist on again,select On in the vehiclepersonalization menu. The On withTowbar setting allows for the



parking assist to work properly witha small item attached to the trailerhitch. Turn off parking assist whentowing a trailer.

To turn the rear parking assistsymbols, guidance lines, or RearCross Traffic Alert on or off, see“Rear Camera” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-50

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle forward, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane DepartureWarning (LDW), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert(LCA), and/or the Active EmergencyBraking System can help to avoid acrash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. When

approaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph). If thevehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), it can detect vehicles todistances of approximately 110 m(360 ft) and operates at all speeds.See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 9-47.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

warning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control, or if yourvehicle is equipped with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), throughvehicle personalization. See the“Auto Collision Preparation” portionof “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When the vehicle isdetected, the vehicle-aheadindicator will display green. Vehiclesmay not be detected on curves,highway exit ramps, or hills; or dueto poor visibility. FCA will not detectanother vehicle ahead until it iscompletely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

With HUD

Without HUD

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedal



as needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle-ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ /3 toset the FCA timing to Far, Medium,Near, or on some vehicles, Off. Thefirst button press shows the currentsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timing

of both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selectingthe alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timing may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front of

the camera sensor behind therearview mirror, and cleaning thefront of the vehicle where radarsensors are located, may correctthe issue.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care on page 10-81.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Active EmergencyBraking SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the ActiveEmergency Braking System, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA) and the AutomaticCollision Preparation (ACP) System.These systems can provide a boostto braking or automatically brake thevehicle to help avoid or lessen theseverity of crashes when driving in aforward gear.



Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

Automatic CollisionPreparation (ACP) System

When driving in a forward gearabove 9 km/h (5 mph), ACP mayhelp reduce crash damage byapplying the brakes. It has adetection range of approximately60 m (197 ft). This front automaticbraking can only occur if a vehicle isdetected. This is shown by the FCAvehicle ahead indicator being lit.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-58.

{ Warning

ACP is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on ACP to brake thevehicle.

ACP may not:. Respond to stopped vehicles,pedestrians, or animals.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect a stopped orslow-moving vehicle or otherobject ahead.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow. Inthese situations, ACP sensorperformance is limited.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Brake Preparation

When quickly approaching a vehicleahead, Brake Preparation reducesbrake response time by having thebrake system prepared for driverbraking to occur more rapidly.



Automatic Braking

If ACP detects it is about to crashwith the vehicle you are followingthat is moving or has come to astop, and the brakes have not beenapplied, it may automatically brakehard. This can help to reduce crashdamage and it may even help toavoid some very low speed crashes.

Automatic Braking may slow thevehicle to a complete stop to try toavoid a potential crash. The vehiclewill only hold at a stop briefly. A firmpress of the accelerator pedal willalso release Automatic Braking.

{ Warning

Automatic Braking mayautomatically brake the vehiclesuddenly in situations where it isunexpected and undesired.It could respond to a turningvehicle ahead, guardrails, signs,and other non-moving objects. To

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

override Automatic Braking, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledor reduced through vehiclepersonalization. See the “AutoCollision Preparation” portion of“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50.

{ Warning

Using the Automatic CollisionPreparation System while towinga trailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system off when towinga trailer.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with vehicles in the side blindzone (or spot) areas. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left orright side mirror display will light upif a vehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert system, readthe entire Lane Change Alertsection before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the Lane Change Alert(LCA) system is a lane-changing aidthat assists drivers with avoidinglane change crashes that occur withvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas from



behind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

LCA Detection Zones

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the next laneover that is in the side blind zone orrapidly approaching from behind.A lit LCA symbol indicates it may beunsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check theLCA display, check mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left orright side mirror display will light upif a vehicle is detected in the next



lane over in that blind zone orrapidly approaching that zone. If theturn signal is activated in the samedirection as a detected vehicle, thisdisplay will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization using theSide Blind Zone Alert option. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-50. If LCA is disabled by thedriver, the LCA mirror displays willnot light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly orwhen towing a trailer. The LCA

detection zones that extend backfrom the side of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed. Use caution while changinglanes when towing a trailer. LCAmay alert to objects attached to thevehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,or object extending out to either sideof the vehicle. Attached objects mayalso interfere with the detection ofvehicles. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaning

instructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care onpage 10-81. If the DIC still displaysthe system unavailable messageafter cleaning both sides of thevehicle toward the rear corners ofthe vehicle, see your dealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thiszone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

When LCA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.



Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide an alert ifthe vehicle is crossing a lanewithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markingsat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater.

{ Warning

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle. The LDW systemmay not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield or headlampsare blocked by dirt, snow,or ice; if they are not in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

proper condition; or if the sunshines directly into thecamera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarking. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LDW inbad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ tothe left of the steering wheel. Thecontrol indicator will light when LDWis on.

When LDW is on, @ is green ifLDW is available to warn of a lanedeparture. If the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal in that direction, @changes to amber and flashes.Additionally, there will be threebeeps, or the driver seat will pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system may not detect lanes aswell when there are:. Close vehicles ahead.. Sudden lighting changes, such

as when driving through tunnels.. Banked roads.

If the LDW system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LDW alerts may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LDW off if theseconditions continue.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

Use premium unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 91 or

higher. Regular unleaded gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher can beused, but acceleration and fueleconomy will be reduced, and anaudible knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 91 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 91 octane rating orhigher, the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, are



available in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. The

malfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-20. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-66.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the only



gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the



nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-81.

When replacing the fuel cap, insertthe tether in its hole beforetightening the cap. Turn the fuel capclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-20.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-20.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-77.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-77.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when towing.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

. The Automatic CollisionPreparation System should beset to Off when towing. SeeActive Emergency BrakingSystem on page 9-60.



{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-28.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing, use the Tow/HaulMode to prevent damage to theengine or transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-34.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.



4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.


3. Shift into a gear.


5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axle

lubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingDo not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9-19.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

{ Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.



To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” following.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Trailer Weight Rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver and all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Yukon Denali 2WD 3.23/3.42 3 810 kg (8,400 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon Denali AWD 3.23/3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali 2WD 3.23/3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali AWD 3.23/3.42 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. The

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers, and cargo in the

vehicle reduce the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.



Trailer tongue weight (1) should be10% to 15% of the loaded trailerweight (2) up to the maximums forvehicle series and hitch type.

Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). See “Total Weighton the Vehicle's Tires” following.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification label onthe center pillar or see Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15. Make sure not



to exceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make surenot to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailerdoes not exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating, or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the tow vehicle andtrailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weightsfor each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can betowed with a weight-carrying hitchwhich simply features a couplerlatched to the hitch ball. Largertrailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight among the twovehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” inTrailer Towing on page 9-73 forrating limits with various hitch types.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

1. Body to Ground Distance2. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (1) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper, otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to haveits own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and follow

the instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Green: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul modebutton at the end of the shift lever.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.



Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9-34.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing on page 9-73. Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric-over-hydraulic trailerbrakes.



This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem, and on the type of trailerbrakes detected. This availablepower output to the trailer brakescan be adjusted to a wide range oftrailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santilock brake or StabiliTraksystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimizetrailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sure

all of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be anincrease in stopping distance ortrailer instability which couldresult in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. Use the ITBCsystem only with electric orelectric over hydraulic trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel on the instrument panel to theleft of the steering column. Thecontrol panel allows adjustment tothe amount of output, referred to asTrailer Gain, available to the trailerbrakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. TheTrailer Brake Control Panel is used



along with the Trailer Brake DisplayPage on the DIC to adjust anddisplay power output to the trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to thetrailer brakes, trailer connection, andsystem operational status.

To display the Trailer Brake DisplayPage do any of the following:. Scroll through the DIC menu

pages.. Press a Trailer Gain button.

If the Trailer Brake Display Pageis not currently displayed, pressa Trailer Gain button to recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting.Each press and release of thegain buttons will then change theTrailer Gain setting.

. Activate the Manual TrailerBrake apply lever.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.To adjust the Trailer Gain, press oneof the Trailer Gain adjustmentbuttons. Press and hold a gainbutton to continuously adjust theTrailer Gain. To turn the output tothe trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gainsetting to 0.0 (zero).

TRAILER OUTPUT: Displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes isconnected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate“- - - - - -” on the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page whenever thefollowing occur:. No trailer is connected.

. A trailer without electric brakesis connected (no DIC messagedisplayed).

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault (a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage will also display inthe DIC).

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is used to apply the trailer’selectric brakes independent of thevehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever tothe left will apply only the trailerbrakes. Use this lever to adjustTrailer Gain to properly adjust thepower output to the trailer brakes.



The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle brakes or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.

Use the following to adjust TrailerGain for each towing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level road surfacerepresentative of the towingcondition and free of traffic atabout 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) and fully apply theManual Trailer Brake apply lever.

Adjusting Trailer Gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using theTrailer Gain adjustment buttons,to just below the point of trailerwheel lock-up, indicated bytrailer wheel squeal or tiresmoke when a trailer wheellocks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheel lock-upis noticed at any time whiletowing.

Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT through theDIC, trailer connection and ITBCsystem status are displayed onthe DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.



CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:. The ITBC system first

determines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault in

the trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage reappears, theelectrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only reappears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this message

continues over multiple ignitioncycles, there is a problem with theITBC system. Have the vehicleserviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.



Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTSC feature. Trailer sway isunintended side-to-side motion of atrailer while being towed. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and theTSC detects that sway is increasing,the vehicle brakes are selectivelyapplied at each wheel, to helpreduce excessive trailer sway. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, and the trailer hasthe electric actuated brake system,StabiliTrak may also apply the trailerbrakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduceengine torque to help slow thevehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-41.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to asafe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment on page 9-77 fortrailer ratings and hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-37 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-37.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-23Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-26Windshield Replacement . . . 10-26

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-43Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-77Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-37.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-37.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-14.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hood release.The handle is under the frontedge of the hood near thecenter. Push the handle to theright and at the same time raisethe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 10-74.

2. Battery on page 10-21.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-12.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See Jump Startingon page 10-74.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-12.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-6.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-6.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10-19.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

If equipped, the ENGINE OIL LOWADD OIL message displays whenthe engine oil level may be too low.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-40. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, see yourdealer.

It is also a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill. Inorder to get an accurate reading,the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handle is aloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oil


Vehicle Care 10-7

to drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, alwaysselect an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oil


Vehicle Care 10-9

from the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when the systemhas calculated that oil life has beendiminished, a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on toindicate that an oil change isnecessary. See Engine OilMessages on page 5-40. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. For vehicles without theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, an oil change is neededwhen the OIL LIFE REMAININGpercentage is near 0%. Your dealerhas trained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-30.

2. Press and hold V for severalseconds. The oil life will changeto 100%.


10-10 Vehicle Care

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and itcomes back on when the vehicle isstarted and/or the OIL LIFEREMAINING is near 0%, the engineoil life system has not been reset.Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.


Vehicle Care 10-11

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1-8. When the engine aircleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Screws (4)2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and the connectorharness from the cover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it

(Continued)


10-12 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap3. Engine Electric

Cooling Fan(s)

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-13

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)


10-14 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or abovethe FULL COLD mark. If it is not,there may be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the FULLCOLD mark, see “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank,”following.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90°C (195°F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine Overheating

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-15.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messageson page 5-40 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5-41.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


Vehicle Care 10-17

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing

on page 9-73.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fast

as normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. The


10-18 Vehicle Care

fans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID message

displays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

to freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-23.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-21

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for battery location.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine when tocheck the lubricant.


10-22 Vehicle Care

How to Check Lubricant

Automatic Transfer Case

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.


Vehicle Care 10-23

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveled

out along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. The rear axle assembly mustbe supported on a flat, level surfaceto get a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) belowthe bottom of the fill hole, located onthe rear axle. Add only enough fluidto reach the proper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The noise controlsystem warranty is given in yourwarranty manual.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person, otherthan for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) with

normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11-13.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


10-26 Vehicle Care

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehicle

warranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch thewindshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The rear wiper blade will not lockin a vertical position so careshould be used when pulling itaway from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Windshield ReplacementThe windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the vehicle has to havethe windshield replaced, get onethat is designed for HUD or theHUD image may look out of focus.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-30.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Fog Lamps

To replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp under thefront bumper.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lamp bulbassembly by pressing theconnector release.


10-28 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the bulb counter clockwiseto remove it from the housing.

Back-Up LampsTo replace a back-up bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-13.

2. Remove the taillamp closeoutcover from the lamp assemblyby pulling rearward from the topand bottom at the same time tounfasten the snap tabs.

3. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

6. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

7. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert it into the taillampassembly, and turn the bulbsocket clockwise until it clicks.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

9. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.


Vehicle Care 10-29

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of the vehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-up Lamp W16W

Fog Lamp PSX26W

LicensePlate Lamp

H11 LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the Instrument Panel FuseBlock. The same amperage fusecan also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-31

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


10-32 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-33

Item Usage

1 Electric RunningBoards

2 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

3 Interior BEC LT1

4 MBS Passenger

5 Suspension LevelingCompressor

6 4WD Transfer CaseElectronic Control

10 Electric Parking Brake

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

17 MBS Driver

21 ALC Exhaust Solenoid

23 Integrated ChassisControl Module

24 Real Time Dampening

25 Fuel Pump PowerModule

Item Usage

26 Spare/BatteryRegulated VoltageControl

28 Upfitter 2

29 Upfitter 2 Relay

30 Wiper

31 TIM

34 Back-up Lamps

35 Antilock Brake SystemValve

36 Trailer Brakes

37 Upfitter 3 Relay

39 Trailer Stop/Turn Right

40 Trailer Stop/Turn Left

41 Trailer Park Lamps

42 Right Parking Lamps

43 Left Parking Lamps

44 Upfitter 3

Item Usage

45 Automatic LevelControl Run/Crank

47 Upfitter 4

48 Upfitter 4 Relay

49 Reverse Lamps

51 Parking Lamp Relay

59 Euro Trailer

60 Air ConditioningControl

63 Upfitter 1

67 Trailer Battery

69 RC Upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBAT Upfitter 3 and 4

72 Upfitter 1 Relay

74 Engine Control ModuleIgnition

75 Miscellaneous IgnitionSpare

76 Transmission Ignition


10-34 Vehicle Care

Item Usage

77 RC Upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBAT Upfitter 1 and 2

83 Euro Trailer RC

84 Run/Crank Relay

87 Engine

88 Injector A – Odd

89 Injector B – Even

90 Oxygen Sensor B

91 Throttle Control

92 Engine Control ModuleRelay

93 Horn

94 Fog Lamps

95 High-Beam Headlamps

100 Oxygen Sensor A

101 Engine Control Module

102 Engine Control Module/Transmission ControlModule

Item Usage

103 Auxiliary Interior Heater

104 Starter

107 Aero Shutter

109 Police Upfitter

112 Starter Relay

114 Front WindshieldWasher

115 Rear Window Washer

116 Cooling Fan Left

121 Right HID Headlamp

122 Left HID Headlamp

123 Cooling Fan Right

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 10-35

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Number Usage

1 Not Used

2 Not Used

3 Not Used

4 Accessory PowerOutlet 1

5 Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

6 APO/BATT

7 Universal GarageDoor Opener/InsideRear View Mirror

8 SEO RetainedAccessory Power

9 Not Used

10 Body ControlModule 3


10-36 Vehicle Care

Number Usage


12 Steering WheelControls Backlighting

13 Not Used

14 Not Used

15 Not Used

16 Discrete Logic IgnitionSensor

17 VPM

18 Mirror WindowModule


20 Front Bolster (ifequipped)

Number Usage

21 Not Used

22 Not Used

23 Not Used

24 Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningIgnition/Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning Auxiliary

25 Instrument ClusterIgnition/SensingDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

26 Tilt Column/SEO, TiltColumn Lock 1/SEO

27 Data Link Connector/Driver Seat Module

Number Usage

28 Passive Entry/PassiveStart/Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning Battery

29 Content Theft

30 Not Used

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 SEO/Automatic LevelControl

34 Park Enable ElectricAdjustable Pedal (ifequipped)

35 Not Used

36 Miscellaneous R/C


Vehicle Care 10-37

Number Usage

37 Heated SteeringWheel

38 Steering Column Lock2 (if equipped)

39 Instrument ClusterBattery

40 Not Used

41 Not Used

42 Euro Trailer (ifequipped)

43 Left Doors

44 Driver Power Seat

45 Not Used

46 Right Heated/Cooled Seat

47 Left Heated/Cooled Seat

48 Not Used

49 Not Used

Number Usage


51 Not Used

52 Retained AccessoryPower/AccessoryRelay

53 Run/Crank Relay

54 Not Used

55 Not Used

56 Not Used

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


10-38 Vehicle Care


Number Usage

1 Not Used

2 Not Used

3 Not Used


5 Not Used

6 Not Used

7 Not Used

8 Glove Box

9 Not Used

10 Not Used

11 Not Used

12 Steering WheelControls


14 Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-39

Number Usage

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 Not Used

18 Not Used


20 Rear SeatEntertainment

21 Sunroof

22 Not Used

23 Not Used

24 Not Used

25 Not Used

26 Info/Airbag

27 Spare/RF WDWRN SW

28 ObstacleDetection/USB

29 Radio

Number Usage

30 Not Used

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 Not Used

34 Not Used

35 Not Used

36 SEO B2

37 SEO


39 A/C Inverter

40 Not Used

41 Not Used

42 Not Used

43 Not Used

44 Right Door WindowMotor

45 Front Blower

Number Usage



48 Amplifier

49 Right Front Seat


51 Not Used

52 Retained AccessoryPower/AccessoryRelay

53 Not Used

54 Not Used

55 Not Used

56 Not Used


10-40 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge.


ISO MiniRelays

Usage

1 Rear Defogger

MicroFuses

Usage

2 Heated Second RowSeat Left

3 Heated Second RowSeat Right

4 Heated Mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass Breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate Module Logic

9 Rear Wiper

10 Rear Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning Blower

11 Second Row Seat

19 Rear Fog Lamp (ifequipped)


Vehicle Care 10-41

M-TypeFuses

Usage

12 Liftgate Module

13 Third Row Seat

14 Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

15 Rear Defogger

UltraMicroRelays

Usage

16 Liftgate

MicroRelays

Usage

17 Liftglass

18 Rear Fog Lamp (ifequipped)

19 Heated Mirrors

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


10-42 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10-50 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level of

traction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-42.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-57.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.


Vehicle Care 10-43

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresThe vehicle has low profile tiresthat are classified as touringtires and are designed for onroad use. The low-profile, widetread design is notrecommended for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving onpage 9-6, for additionalinformation.

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving onpage 9-6.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection onpage 10-54.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire sidewall.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10-59.


Vehicle Care 10-45

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-48 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

(8) Temporary Use Only: Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-73.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, it

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-48.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-48 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-56.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are

determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-59.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.

See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-49

Caution (Continued)

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and an

example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-73 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Returnthe tires to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15and Tire Pressure on page 10-48.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-51.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors are

mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.


10-52 Vehicle Care

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-30 and TireMessages on page 5-46.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-48.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-54, Tire Rotation onpage 10-55 and Tires onpage 10-41.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use only

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunction


Vehicle Care 10-53

light and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-57.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching process

should be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.comor call 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.


10-54 Vehicle Care

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power mode inON/RUN/START. See IgnitionPositions on page 9-20.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infopage option is turned on. Theinfo pages on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-30.

4. Use the DIC controls on the rightside of the steering wheel toscroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DIC info page.

5. Press and hold the V (Set/Reset) button located in thecenter of the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.


Vehicle Care 10-55

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-56and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-61.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-48and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-51.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection on page 10-54 and TireRotation on page 10-55 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, the


Vehicle Care 10-57

year. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet General

Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-43 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-55 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tire

(Continued)


10-58 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

could cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

road tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the winter

tires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-50.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GM

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

specific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-57 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


10-60 Vehicle Care

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.

If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

a crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

control and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-63

Warning (Continued)

Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,

if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-4.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

3. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire


10-64 Vehicle Care

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob

2. Wing Nut Retaining theWheel Blocks

3. Wing Nut Retaining theTool Bag

1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded to accessthe trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward the frontof the vehicle and lift the rearportion of the bag upward toremove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)

10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock(6), insert the ignition key, turn itclockwise and then pull itstraight out.


10-66 Vehicle Care

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheel

wrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

6. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching the spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring through thecenter of the wheel.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecenter of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-62 for moreinformation.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

3. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right FrontSimilar


10-68 Vehicle Care

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle and only onejack handle extension. Attachthe wheel wrench to the jackhandle extension. Attach thejack handle to the jack. Positionthe jack on the frame behind theflat tire where the frame sectionsoverlap. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle (2) and both jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thejack handle (2) to the jack (1).Use the jacking pad (5) providedon the rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (4) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

4. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

5. Take off the flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-69

6. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

7. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

8. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheel isheld against the hub.

9. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

10. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.


10-70 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

sequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

{ Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

{ Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.Refer to the following graphics andinstructions to help you:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

9. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the retainer down throughthe center wheel opening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.


10-72 Vehicle Care

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tire. If the tire moves,use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools, do the following:

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag.

2. Assemble wheel blocks and jacktogether with the wing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure toposition the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15. For instructions onhow to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10-64.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-43. This sparetire should not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure.Repair and replace the road tire assoon as it is convenient, and stowthe spare tire for future use.

{ Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-21.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If the vehicle is equipped withdual batteries, using the batterythat is closer to the starter will

reduce electrical resistance. Thisis located on the passengerside, in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwantedground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).


Vehicle Care 10-75

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal is undera red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover thepositive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remote negative(−) terminals, see EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


10-76 Vehicle Care

6. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to theengine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.


Vehicle Care 10-77

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing aredinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dolly

towing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions. Seeyour dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

{ Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

{ Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer caseto N (Neutral).

Follow these steps to dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle, facingforward and on a level surface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

For vehicles with electric parkingbrakes, the parking brake cannotbe applied and the tires must bechocked.


Vehicle Care 10-79

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive on page 9-35 for theproper procedure. Check thatthe vehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. With the transmission in D(Drive), turn the engine off.

{ Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damageto the vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negative batterycable at the battery and securethe nut and bolt. Cover thenegative battery post with a

non-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

{ Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.


10. Keep the RKA fob outside ofthe vehicle, and manually lockdoors. Access vehicle same asdead vehicle/fob process (backup key in door lock).

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, shift thetransmission to P (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Start the engine, then shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to Two-Wheel Drive High. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 9-35for directions on shifting out ofN (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is inTwo-Wheel Drive High byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off the ignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.



10-80 Vehicle Care

10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 32°F butwill reset with normal usage.

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

{ Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would not

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.

{ Caution

Towing a four-wheel drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an four-wheel drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

This vehicle should not be towedwith the rear wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)– Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

{ Caution

Towing a four-wheel drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an four-wheel drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.


Vehicle Care 10-81

This vehicle should not be towedwith any wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)– Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-39.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)


10-82 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-83

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum or stainlesssteel. To prevent damage alwaysfollow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum orstainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.


10-84 Vehicle Care

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-11.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.


Vehicle Care 10-85

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at leastevery other oil change lubricate theouter tie rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on1500 Series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

{ Caution

Lubrication of applicable Steering/Suspension points should not bedone unless temperature is -12°C(10°F) or higher, or damage couldresult.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assiststep hinges, unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughly


10-86 Vehicle Care

clean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. If equippedwith power running boards, extendthem and then use a high pressurewash to clean all joints and gaps.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.


Vehicle Care 10-87

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.


10-88 Vehicle Care

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing these

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-89

Caution (Continued)

solvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.


10-90 Vehicle Care

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel on page 9-66.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-6.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-54.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-55.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-6 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-13.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.



. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-81. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-25.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-48.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-54.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signsof wear at least once a year.See Exterior Care onpage 10-81. Lubricate thesuspension and steeringcomponents at least every otheroil change. (If equipped withgrease fittings)

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-24.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-81.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-25.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-28.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing onpage 10-64.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.

Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-12.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with AWDor 4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.



(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-12.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-81.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-86 and Exterior Care onpage 10-81.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil on page 10-6.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-13.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission (8 Speed) DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19300536, inCanada 19300537).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Power Assist Steps, and OuterTailgate Handle Pivot Points

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41–114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side — 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 -

Passenger Side — 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 -

Rear — 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 -



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.5 L 17.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 8.0 L 8.5 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance

Center. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-800-462-8583. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,alerts, OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.



GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the5 years/(160 000 km) 100,000 miPowertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.



. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.

General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs

and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM New

Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair



center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-31.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connection, andDiagnostic Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting public emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and your

vehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Termsand Conditions and PrivacyStatement for more details includingsystem limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is on.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.. Off: System is off. Press the blue

OnStar button twice to speakwith an OnStar Advisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.


14-2 OnStar

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires a specific OnStarsubscription plan.

. Obtain the WiFi network name,or Service Set Identifier or SSID,and passphrase (if equipped).

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

a specific OnStarsubscription plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage WiFi Settings (ifequipped).

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Emergency Advisoravailable 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the OnStar system canautomatically connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. The built-insystem can automatically connect tohelp in certain crashes.

Press> to connect to an OnStarEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can provideimportant information to emergencypersonnel. OnStar EmergencyAdvisors are trained to provideassistance and link to existingpublic emergency service providersin emergency situations.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Crisis Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information if acrisis occurs.


OnStar 14-3

SecurityOnStar provides services includingStolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteIgnition Block, and RoadsideAssistance, if equipped. OnStar canunlock the vehicle doors remotely,if equipped with automatic doorlocks, and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Subscribers cansend destinations fromMapQuest.com to the vehicleTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system (ifequipped). When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.


14-4 OnStar

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle (ifequipped). After the call ends, pressthe “Go” button on the navigationscreen to begin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav orDestination Download, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe required specific Onstarsubscription plan includes theservices that follow to helpcustomers stay connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped)

The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot thatprovides a high-speed, wirelessInternet connection to connectmultiple mobile devices (data planrequired).

1. To retrieve WiFi hotspotinformation, press= and selector say “WiFi settings.”

2. The WiFi settings will display theWiFi network name/SSID,passphrase, and level ofencryption.

3. To change the SSID orpassphrase, pressQ or call1-888-4-ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® orWindows 7 or 8 mobile devices.From the mobile device, check thevehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire

pressure (if the vehicle is equippedwith the tire pressure monitoringsystem); or activate remote hornand lights. Also remote start thevehicle (if factory equipped) orunlock the doors from anywherewith a wireless connection (ifequipped with automatic locks).With a required specific OnStarsubscription plan, a destination canbe sent to the vehicle. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar RemoteLink® Key FobServices

This feature is included for fiveyears and allows for remote doorlock/unlock (if equipped withautomatic locks), remote start (iffactory equipped), or activation ofhorn and lights from anywhere witha wireless signal. Download the appand start using it any time during thetrial period to get started.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

This service allows calls to be madeand received from the vehicle.

To Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.


14-6 OnStar

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics canperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andother major vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded, pressQ, and an Advisorcan run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediatelyto terminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain theOnStar service options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR

(1-888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for service


OnStar 14-7

in that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. The PIN will need to bechanged the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.


14-8 OnStar

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Do not place items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-84. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties


OnStar 14-9

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - softwareacknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associatedwith libcurl and unzip and for otherthird party software please seehttp://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index andhttps://www.onstar.com/web/portal/getdocuments

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, use

or other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,


14-10 OnStar

Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variation

thereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Active EmergencyBraking System . . . . . . . . 1-19, 9-60

Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-27Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-47Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-28AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-62

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-55

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10


i-2 INDEX

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking SystemActive Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-19Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-67Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56, 3-58Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86


INDEX i-3

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-47Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-54Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-58Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-23Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-37

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5

Engine (cont'd)Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Cooling System Messages . . .5-40Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-29Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-35, 10-21Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12


INDEX i-5

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-28Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-27Requirements, California . . . . .9-67System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-37

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-58Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Transmission Temperature . . . .5-16Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-29High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-29

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-50


i-6 INDEX

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-40Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-24Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-42Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-43LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20

Lamps (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lane Change Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


INDEX i-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-26

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-27Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-25Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-17Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-28Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-43MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-3Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-40Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Object Detection System . . . . .5-42Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-44Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46


i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont'd)Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-24Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-23

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® VehicleDiagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-27Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-33


INDEX i-9

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-25Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-39Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-25

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10


i-10 INDEX

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-25Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-24

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56, 3-58

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14

Service (cont'd)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Special Application Services . . . 11-7Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40


INDEX i-11

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Steering System Messages . . . . 5-46StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

SystemActive Emergency Braking . . . .9-60Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-21Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tires (cont'd)Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-51Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


i-12 INDEX

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-70Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-70Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-77Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-84Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-84Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-58Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-49Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-65

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61


INDEX i-13

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-46Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5


i-14 INDEX

2 NOTES

Documents

2k15i gmc yukon den 23168273B.ai (Modern Bridge - … 2015i Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual (GMNA- Black plate (4,1) Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico ... Headlamp High/Low-Beam